Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. 1 . Finally.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.

2 .

The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. fixtures. such as duct. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. and plumbing engineering workflows. Germany. Add more detailed modelling elements. electrical panels. and piping. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. and plumbing fixtures. such as mechanical equipment. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. Add basic MEP elements. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. 3 . electrical. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format.

they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. as well as how to open and save them. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. When you open a training file. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. NOTE Depending on your installation. So. and sheets to document the project. your Training folder may be in a different location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. you can choose to save your work. For example. However. when you add ductwork. Create detail views. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. and tags. such as templates and families. to provide a richer and more finished design. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. templates. In this exercise. is located and accessed in the training files location. however. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. On the Contents tab. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Metric file names have an _m suffix. For example. When you install the training files as instructed. you learn where the training files are located. Metric: files for users working with metric units. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Create schedules. After completing each exercise. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. views. annotations. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. You do not design entire systems. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

For example. depending on the instructions in the tutorial.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. For File name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. double-click Imperial or Metric. and click Open.rvt. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option.rvt and make changes. and you can open any supported file type. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. select the folder in which to save the new file. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. a list of file types displays. You may close the file with or without saving changes. enter the new file name. click ➤ Save As. you are prompted to save the changes.rvt) is selected. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. For Files of type. 8 If you have made changes. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. scroll down. 4 Click the training file name. and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. and click Save. if you open settings. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Project Files (*. Accessing Training Files | 5 . the Open dialog displays.

6 .

scope. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. 2D and 3D view. the hierarchy of elements. the floor or roof remains connected. In this case. sections. drawings. In this case. the operation of the software is parametric. If the length of the elevation is changed. drawing sheets. You learn the terminology. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. and plans. and schedules required for a building project. ■ ■ 7 . As you work in drawing and schedule views. the door retains this relationship to the partition. hence. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. quantities. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the parameter is one of association or connection. If you move the partition. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. In the Revit MEP model. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. schedules. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and phases when you need it. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. every drawing sheet. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views.

boilers. For example. and electrical panels. tags. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. walls and ceilings are hosts. For example. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. filled regions. dimensions. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. grids. and reference planes are datum elements. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. and keynotes are annotation elements. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. For example. sprinklers. For example. They help to describe or document the design. For example. tags. sinks. ducts. levels. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. Datum elements help to define project context. dimensions. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. and electrical panels. Examples include detail lines. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. They display in relevant views of the design. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and 2D detail components. ducts. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. When you change something. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. sinks. sprinklers. boilers. The second is its approach to propagating building changes.

For example. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. In other cases. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. In Revit MEP. first floor. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Often. Most often. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. from geometry to construction data. section views. programming is not required. By using a single project file. and ceilings. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. you can explicitly control them.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. for example. and types. The project file contains all information for the building design. families. Project: In Revit MEP. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. If you can draw. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. This information includes components used to design the model. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. floors. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. you must be in a section or elevation view. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. views of the project. such as roofs. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. However. or bottom of foundation. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. To place levels. and drawings of the design. schedules. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. top of wall. and so forth). industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. North . elevation views. Understanding the Concepts | 9 .This implementation provides flexibility for designers.

Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. and similar graphical representation. For example. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. showing. hiding. Then experiment with them. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. or layer the views to see only the one on top. Unlike system and standard component families. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. You can also display several project views at one time. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. However. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. identical use. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. System families can be transferred between projects. A type can also be a style. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. and wires. each in-place family contains only a single type. such as a A0 title block. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. For example. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. A type can be a specific size of a family. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). With a few clicks. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. pipes. Type: Each family can have several types. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. System families include ducts. For example. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category.

To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. To return the panel to the ribbon. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button.

Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. and CAD files. data and systems. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. and settings. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. When working on the Modify tab.. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. and for switching views. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. select the tool first. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. project and system parameters. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. tools used for running analysis on the current design. architect-specific tools. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. then select what you want to modify.. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tools used for editing existing elements.

This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. provides requested information. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. By default. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. when adding duct. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. displays frequently used tools. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. closes the application menu (double-click). To keep a panel expanded. For example. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . provides access to common tools.

(Open) save the current drawing. select a file to open.. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (Save As) export the current drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (Export) On the application menu.. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands.. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . select a template and create a new drawing. such as Export and Publish. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. click..

.On the application menu. click. and Walkthrough. but is not enabled by default. annotation. annotation. or template file... NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. saves a current project. or template file. (Licensing) close the file. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. provides views including Default 3D. To enable or disable a tool item. to. family. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar.. publish the current project. (Print) access product and license information. Camera. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. family. (Publish) print the current drawing. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project.

Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Clear the Status Bar check mark. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. when you switch to another editing mode. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. displaying the same information. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Clipboard. Modify. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. repeat the command. This displays the command history in a list. To show the Status Bar again. a tool tip appears next to the cursor.To undo or redo a series of operations. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. When you are using a command. Starting with the most recent command. Group. workshared components. check the Status Bar. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. To hide the Status Bar. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. However. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. or the Family Editor. When you are highlighting an element or component. In addition.

click (Modify). do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Place a Wall. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool.To cancel or exit the current command. On the Quick Access toolbar. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. for example. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. To change existing elements to a different type. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. When you place an element in a drawing. select one or more elements of the same category.

For example. After you are familiar with these tasks. 1 Click ➤ Open. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. click Training Files. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . There are several ways to access zoom options.rvt. Zoom the view In the tutorials. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. In the following steps.

4 Click Zoom Out (2x). on the Navigation bar. In the drawing area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. click . SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. the view zooms in on the selected area. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 9 To display SteeringWheels. If you do not have a wheel mouse. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. 6 Click in the drawing area. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Modifying the View | 19 . The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. To modify or add snap increments. When you release the mouse button. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. NOTE As you zoom in and out. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command.

The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. moving the wheel to the desired location. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. To define settings for SteeringWheels. click the SteeringWheels tab. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 14 To exit the wheel. and click tin the Options dialog. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. Click and drag to orbit the design. For more information about SteeringWheels. As you move the mouse. press ESC. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. and then using the Zoom tool again. ➤ Options. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in.

2 Enter ZR. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.Design. display along the ends. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Small blue dots. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. and select the duct. referred to as shape handles. bottoms.Design ➤ Floor Plans.HVAC Plan . When drawing or modifying an MEP design. called drag controls. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. and open Level 2 . After you are familiar with these tasks. Similar controls. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. as shown. These are the drag controls. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct.

In this example. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Move. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. 6 On the Undo menu. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. click the Undo command. or press CTRL+Z. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . select the first item in the list. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. on the Standard toolbar. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. All changes you make to a project are tracked.

as shown. In this case. 11 With the duct already selected. and click again to specify the ending position. The duct is moved to the new position. and drag it to the left as shown. such as Move and Copy. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. After selecting the element to move. 10 Move the cursor to the right. you want to move the duct. for example.Some commands. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . click to specify the starting position.

12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Select Mechanical . Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. Click OK.End a command Some commands. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Press ESC twice. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. such as the Modify Ducts command. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. For example. 13 To end a command.Return. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. 14 Enter VG. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .Supply. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

You can either select a template from the template library. settings. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. click Browse. 2 In the New Project dialog. and open Metric ➤ Templates. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. and open North. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. such as ducts and pipes. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. such as coordination review and interference checking. New projects inherit all the families. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. select Project. 5 In the New Project dialog. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. and click Open. link files. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 27 . You also learn how to use collaboration tools. click Training files. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. In that case. you learn how to start a project from a template. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. such as the default project units and settings. system families. the default building levels and standard views. 7 In the Project Browser. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. 6 Click OK. create and manage views. and loadable families. use copy/monitor.rte template. under Create new. and geometry from the starting template. under Template file. and modify system settings. Finally. You can choose from several templates.

If you want to use a template other than the default. select Project template. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. review the construction materials listed. When you select the material.rte template and click Open. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. click (Browse). Click OK. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. you can select it now. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. 10 Using the same method. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. (Browse). To maintain office standards and reduce rework. ■ ■ Under Create new. For example. select Level 1. select Manchester. for City. click Browse. for Energy Data. Click OK twice. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. create another new project using the Construction template. select School or University. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. NH. click Edit.8 In the drawing area. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. under Energy Analysis. navigate to Metric Templates. For Location. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 11 Close the file with or without saving it. In the Choose Template dialog. Click Cancel. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. ■ For Building Construction.

25 In the left pane.00 mm. 23 In the left pane. piping. 33 Click OK. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.00 mm. For Categories. for 90. 110. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 27 Click OK. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 260. 140. After standard settings have been established for an organization. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 290. power distribution systems. for 90.00 mm. under Duct Settings. Click OK twice. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. and fire protection systems. 24 In the right pane. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 22 In the right pane.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Holding CTRL.00 mm. click Sizes. and 310. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. click Wiring. wiring. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 110. under Duct Settings.00 mm. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.rfa and click Open.000 mm. and demand factors for electrical systems. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. plumbing. for 20.00 mm. select Identity Data. 26 In the right pane. and 140.00 mm. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. click Round.00 mm. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. select Views. click Rectangular.00 mm. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. under Pipe Settings.

click Browse. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. 38 Close the file. 4 In the New Project dialog. You need to create the MEP model for the project. under Create new.Origin to Origin. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. select View Name. select Project. For Then by. To enable this coordination. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. sheets. and groups that are contained in a project. under Template file. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 5 Click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. In addition. select Associated Level. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. Select Ascending Click OK twice. select Family and Type. select Sub-Discipline. From the Positioning list. click Training. families. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views.rvt. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. Notice that the file is saved as a template. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. For Sort by. Click Open. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. Linking Projects In this exercise. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. For Then by. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. select Auto .

8 If necessary. select Room Bounding.Mech. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. 12 Click OK. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. select the linked architectural model. under Constraints.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. Linking Projects | 31 . 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.

21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model.Floor. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click Plan View types.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 19 On the left side of the view. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. click the level line for 03. 17 On the Options Bar. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. highlight the linked model. 27 In the drawing area. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. appears above the copied elements. indicating that a relationship is established. warnings notify you of any violations. for the link file. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. indicating that an element has changed. click Custom. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Linking Projects | 33 . or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. and click to select the linked model. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. and that the copied elements are monitored. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. select Custom. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. a warning message displays. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. After copying. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. click By Host View. level 3. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. 34 On the Basics tab. 29 In the drawing area. and the level 4. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. If you modify a monitored element.

under View Properties. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 36 Click OK. 5 On the Basics tab. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . 2 In the New View Template dialog. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. and Topography. for Name. Roads. for the link file.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. enter Mechanical View and click OK. click Custom. Click OK. deselect Levels. click Edit. select Custom. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Under Visibility. 7 Click OK twice. Click OK. Select Show categories from all disciplines. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Under Visibility. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Planting. deselect Parking. 3 In the View templates dialog. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. Site. click Custom. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog.

select Mechanical and click OK. 7 Click OK. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. under Template file. and your username when using worksharing. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. Notice that the drawing area is black. These settings control the graphics. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 3 Under Colors. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.rte. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. selection default options. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. 8 Click ➤ Options. 5 In the New Project dialog. under View Templates.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. Modifying System Settings | 35 . click Training Files. 9 In the Options dialog. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. journal cleanup options. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. they are not saved to project files or template files. 2 In the Options dialog. notification preferences. click Browse. and click OK. click the Graphics tab. click the Graphics tab. select Invert background color.

NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. For Tooltip assistance. and click OK.10 Under Colors. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. you specify default file locations. 11 In the Color dialog. including your default project template. family template files. 21 Close the file without saving it. 13 Under Notifications. the elements causing the error display using this color. 17 Press ESC to end the command. select One hour. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. select None. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 12 Click the General tab. click the value for Selection color. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 18 Select the wall. When an error occurs. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 2 In the Options dialog. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. However. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 14 Click OK. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select yellow. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. click the File Locations tab. and family libraries. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files.

10 In the Places dialog. you can start a new project with that template. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. and Import dialogs. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. Click and click Browse to select a template. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. 4 Click Cancel. centralized. click Browse. and you can create new libraries. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. 5 Under Default path for user files.3 Under Default template file. Specifying File Locations | 37 . click Places. click Browse. In the following illustration. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. under Default path for family template files. and click Open. click Browse. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. note the list of library names. ➤ New ➤ Project. This path is set automatically during the installation process. You can modify the existing library names and path. such as in a large. select the folder to save your files to by default. or loading a Revit MEP file. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. TIP To view a template. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. However. Load. When you are opening. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. saving. 7 In the Options dialog. Save. 8 Click Cancel. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path.

38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Save. and select it as the library path. and click Open. click the My Library icon. and click (Browse). 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. ➤ Open. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. click My Library. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and click OK twice. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 15 Under Library Name. and Import dialogs.11 In the Places dialog. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. templates. and change the name to My Library. click (Add Value). The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. or families. Load. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects.

10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. select Ignore words in uppercase. 2 In the Options dialog. 11 In the Options dialog. 19 Click Cancel. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. enter sheetmtl-Cu. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. If you want to relocate this path. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click the Spelling tab. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 3 Under Settings. 27 Click OK. 12 Create a new project using the default template. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. view the current path. such as bump maps. click OK. click Edit. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 5 In the text editor. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. specify the new location here. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. and decal image files. 22 Select My Library. If you work in a large office. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. custom color files. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 14 Click in the drawing area. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. click Edit. 9 In the text editor. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 20 Click ➤ Options. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. click Places. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 21 On the File Locations tab. This path is determined during installation. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances.

20 Under Settings. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. You can turn snap settings on and off. click the Spelling tab. 25 Close the file without saving it. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 21 Under Personal dictionary. click Browse. 22 In the text editor. and enter 500 . work with snapping turned off. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 2 In the New Project dialog. In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click Restore Defaults. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . you modify snap increments. click Training Files. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click OK. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. under Template file. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. delete sheetmtl-CU. click Edit. 19 In the Options dialog. under Dimension Snaps. click Close..17 In the Spelling dialog. As you zoom in and out within a view.rte. click OK. 24 In the Options dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 4 In the New Project dialog. 18 Click ➤ Options. 23 In the text editor. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. you modify snap settings. 6 In the Snaps dialog. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default.

While sketching. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. This is the increment that you added previously. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. TIP To zoom while sketching. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . click OK. If it does not. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 8 In the Snaps dialog. such as ZO to zoom out. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. If you do not have a wheel button. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. and move the cursor to the right. zoom out until it does so. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. use the wheel button on your mouse. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. For example. enter SM. deselect Chain.7 Under Object Snaps. 10 On the Options Bar.

Do not set the wall end point. 22 Move the cursor downward. the midpoint. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and specify the wall endpoint. 26 Close the file. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. and the wall edges. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Make sure you also delete the semicolon.. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. it will snap to the endpoints. 19 Enter SM. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. and delete the value 500 . 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. If you move the cursor along the wall. 25 Click OK. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 24 Under Dimension Snaps. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. with or without saving it. and move the cursor to the right.

43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. However. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. methodology. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. This system consists of a cooling tower. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and then you create a plenum level. you design a mechanical system for an office building. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. 45 . you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. duct system and a hydronic piping system. you first configure the linked architectural model. you first plan the system. water source heat pump (WSHP). To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP.autodesk. As you create the mechanical system.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. If the tutorial training files are not present. After finishing each exercise. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. you can choose to save your work. you will understand the process. In this exercise. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. In this lesson. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. go to http://www. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. By following the recommended workflow. At the end of the tutorial.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.

and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. and double-click West .MEP. NOTE When working with a linked file. and click OK. you add a level for plenums. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. In this section. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . not in the MEP training file. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. These components are defined in the architectural training file. select Room Bounding. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. ceilings. 6 In the Project Browser. under Constraints.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click to select it.Space Plan is highlighted.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 1 In the Project Browser. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. click Training Files. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. roof. indicating that it’s the active view. Next. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. and after the linked model highlights. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and enter Level 2 Plenum. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. right-click Level 2 Plenum. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. enter 2600mm. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Click Plan View Types.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and click Properties. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. For Offset. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. 9 On the Draw panel. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). verify that only Floor Plan is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and in the Plan View Types dialog. 16 Press Esc. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. Preparing Spaces | 47 . 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. The new level is placed. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2.

48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter an Offset of 300mm.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. for Top. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. click Edit. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. For Sub-Discipline. and then place spaces in various types of areas.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. For View Classification. In this exercise. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. you place spaces in areas of the building model. In the next exercise. Under Identity Data. In this exercise. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . for View Scale. and click Apply Default View Template. and for Offset. 20 In the Project Browser. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. for View Range.Plenum. Under Extents. you can choose to save your work. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. However. enter 0. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. select MEP . right-click Level 2 Plenum. for Default View Template. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. select Design. Under View Depth. NOTE After finishing each exercise. select Plenum Plan. for Level. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. select Level Above (Level 3). For Cut plane. ■ Click OK twice. verify that 1 : 100 is selected.

Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. For Space. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. For Upper Limit. and ceilings).rvt. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. enter 0. click Training Files. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m.Space Plan is highlighted. For (Tag Location). select New. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Horizontal. For Offset. walls. Placing Spaces | 49 . select Level 2 Plenum.

for Number. For Name. ensuring coordination between the files.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. Click OK.7 Click to place the space. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. enter Library. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 Select the space. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 14 In the drawing area. enter 219. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection.

18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. For Upper Limit. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. For Offset.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select Level 3. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 21 Using the method learned previously. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. Placing Spaces | 51 . 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. enter 0. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. and then click Modify.

Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. you place a space in a large corridor area. under Energy Analysis. 23 Click OK. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then split the space using a space separation line.

select Level 3. indicating that it’s the active view. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. enter 0.Space Plan is highlighted. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. for Upper Limit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and for Offset.

10 Click in the number column. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule.7 In the Project Browser. 9 In the schedule. click in the name column. and scroll to the newly placed space. which was numbered 219Q. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. In the schedule. and change the space number to 216A. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and select Corridor.

15 Press Esc twice. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 11 Close the schedule view. as shown.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 .

18 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .16 Using the method learned previously. place a space in the lower area of the split space. you place a space in a chase. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. The new space is numbered correctly (216B).

Space Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.rvt. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. If necessary.

but that the space does not fill the entire chase. enter 0. 10 In the plan view. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. for Upper Limit. For Offset. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. right-click. 12 Click in the section view. 6 Enter VG. On the Options Bar. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. and click Element Properties. In the plan view. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase.4 Press Esc. and then click OK. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Upper Limit. expand Spaces. select Interior and Reference. click in the chase area to place the space. select Level 3. select the space. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Roof Level.

and click OK.Space Plan. 15 Press Esc. enter 1200. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. under Loaded Tags.■ For Limit Offset. ceilings. enter 225PC. Bounding elements (such as walls. and maximize the view. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. floors. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. All spaces in the view are tagged. For Number. enter Chase. Under Identity Data. for Name. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. 17 Type ZF. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. the space displays the volume up to the roof only.

on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. click Training Files. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. In the next exercises. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. In this exercise. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click View ➤ Zones. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. To display space reference lines. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. After a space is placed in an area. under Spaces. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . which removes the space from the Default zone. it is automatically added to the Default zone. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area.Zoning is highlighted. click Reference. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. 3 Right-click in the System Browser.20 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Zoning is highlighted. and a new zone is created. under Energy Analysis. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The Zone tool is active. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and verify the zones in the System Browser. Next. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. you assign spaces to a zone. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. The new zone is listed in the System Browser.rvt. double-click 121 Cafeteria. The graphic in the System Browser updates. click Training Files. you assign spaces to zones in the building. ) or 5 In the System Browser. As you do this. and click OK. To display space reference lines. select Occupiable. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. under Spaces. click Reference. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. indicating that the space is occupiable.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the Edit Zone tab displays. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. indicating that it’s the active view.

Using the Edit Zone tab. and Electrical 220 spaces. 4 In the drawing area. Expand HVAC Zones. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). To view the zone in the drawing area. you can add or remove a space from the zone. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. type VG. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 5 With the drawing area active. Click OK. Instruction. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). you need to activate the zone visibility. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Instruction 221. and click Finish Editing Zone.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. and modify the zone properties. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. select Computer Lab 222. select HVAC Zones. In the System Browser.

Zoning view to activate it. expand 2 . Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning.TIP After you finish editing the zone. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. 5 Click in the Level 1 . verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. enter 2 . In this exercise. 9 In the System Browser. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . To display space reference lines. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK.rvt. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. under Spaces. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You activated zone visibility in the views. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building.Area B.West . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. under Identity Data.Zoning is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. for Name. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. 11 Close the System Browser. click Training Files. and verify the zone in the System Browser. click Reference.West .

7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.Zoning floor plan. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Zoning view. 15 Press Esc. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. Select Attached End. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning view. click in the Level 2 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . Verify that the distance is 12mm. 8 In the Level 1 . 9 With the Add Space tool active. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. zoom out.

enter Lounge . You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. and zone information. In this exercise.Zoning to make it the active view. for Name Value. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. click the corner where the Top. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. Front. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . verify that Wireframe is selected. on the ViewCube. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. double-click the zone tag. double-click Level 1 . Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). space.rvt. you verify the building. and select 109 Lounge. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. 19 Close the file with or without saving it.Zoning view. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog.East. click Training Files. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser.

■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. select 1_South_Area C. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. click (Isolate). 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. With 109 Lounge selected. Using the Highlight tool. you isolate the space. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. ■ ■ On the Details tab. Next. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. ■ Click (Highlight). The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red.

■ ■ ■ Next. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. Next. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. select 109 Lounge. and in the People dialog. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. This indicates the cooling set point. Next. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. verify that <Building> is selected. and click OK. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. click . For People. verify that <Building> is selected. and air changes per hour. and humidification set point. This indicates the heating set point.11 °C : 32. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). click . scroll down in the left pane. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. For Cooling Information. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. heating air temperature. verify that 23. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. the zone information displays for the selected zone. For Heating Information. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . Below the list of spaces and zones.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. For Electrical Loads. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. click .22 °C : N/A is specified. This indicates the outdoor air per person. click (Shading). and in the Space Type Settings dialog. and then click OK. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. cooling air temperature. and dehumidification set point. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. outdoor air per area. the space information displays for the selected space. Below the list of spaces and zones. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. select Lounge/Recreation. and then click OK. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space.33 °C : 12. For Construction Type.22 °C : N/A is specified. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. verify that 21.

The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. 15 In the Project Browser. click Cancel. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. open MEP . enter 0. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Level 3. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. roofs. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. and other room-bounding components. floors. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. 12 Using the methods learned previously. For Offset.

Modify space properties 19 Select the space. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . For Name. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. and zone information. select Plenum. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. for Number. Click OK. In this exercise. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. enter 212P. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Under Energy Analysis. Because this is an unoccupied space. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. space. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. you verified building. and verify that the space has replaced the void. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. select Plenum. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and select space Plenum 212P. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Under Energy Analysis.

For Project Phase. For Ground Plane. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. verify that 300 is specified. For Export Complexity. select School or University. verify that Level 1 is selected. this option adjusts the times automatically. select space Library 219.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 In the drawing area.rvt. right-click. click Edit. verify that New Construction is selected. In order to select a space. On the Place tab. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. For Postal Code. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. click Training Files. If. under Energy Analysis. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. For Location. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). for Building Service. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Building Construction. you need to select this option. for City. Click OK twice. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and click OK. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that <Building> is specified. click in the Value field. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. enter 03101. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click Element Properties. is selected.Space Plan. for Energy Data. NH. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. under Volume Computations. double-click Level 2 . and click OK. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. On the Weather tab. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . verify that Manchester. For Sliver Space Tolerance. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser.

verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. and enter 15 sq.Audio Visual. For Sensible. for Values. Next. a cooling load. Under Heat Gain (per Person). it should be corrected before you calculate loads. select Specified. For Building Service. and then click . In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. and click OK. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that Occupiable is selected. for Values. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. click Edit. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Condition Type. select Specified. both. Select Area per person.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. verify that School or University is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. for Values. Click OK. enter 60 W. For Building Construction. Select the space associated with the warning. select Actual. Click OK twice. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. NH. 12 Click the Details tab. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For People. select Heated and cooled. select Actual. You have verified the building information. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. select Library . you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). for Values. is specified. enter 45 W. For Space Type. m. For Location. Under Power. and click to learn the cause for the warning. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. verify that <Building> is specified. verify that Manchester. click in the Value column. For Latent. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. click Edit. or neither.

click Information). you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. or zone information. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. There should be no warnings displayed. 16 After you review the loads report. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. and a loads report displays. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. or make any changes to the model. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. click Calculate. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. 21 Click OK. In this exercise. space. You should correct the space error in the building model. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. and zone information for the building model.Space Plan. and click OK. 19 In the drawing area. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. select 219 Library. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. space. select 219 Library. and under Heating Information. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. and can be modified here. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. weather. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. under Energy Analysis. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. 15 Review the loads report for project. 17 In the loads report. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed.11°C.

rvt. Click OK. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. in relatively small increments. 3 In the drawing area. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. click Training Files. click to the right of the building to place the legend. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. select HVAC Zones. indicating that it’s the active view.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . For Color Scheme. 5 Zoom in to the legend. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Expanded Ranges. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. select the color scheme legend. and click OK. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. The new scheme displays in the view. select Cooling Load . under Schemes. The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

12 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. 11 Using the method learned previously. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. In the next exercise. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . In this exercise.rvt. you create a schedule for the supply air system project.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser.

select Spaces. select New Construction.Space Fill is the active view. Click OK. ■ Click Calculated Value. select Air Flow. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Select Formula. If you select Show categories from all disciplines.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. For Discipline. In the Calculated Value dialog.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. For Phase. Click OK. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. For Type. enter . Under Available fields. select HVAC. In the Schedule Properties dialog. more category options are available. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and click OK. select Calculated Supply Airflow. For Name. for Select available fields from. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. for Formula. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Select Schedule building components. select Spaces. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. For Formula. enter Airflow Delta. In the Fields dialog. and then click . enter Space Airflow Schedule. click (Browse).

When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. For Then by. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. Header. select red. right-click to access schedule properties. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . and then click Conditional Format. select Level. For Value. Click OK twice. In the Color dialog. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. select Level. For Fields. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. select Not Between. ■ The schedule displays. and Blank line. a view opens that contains the selected space. Select Ascending. select Number. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. select Airflow Delta. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. verify that Show is highlighted. Under Conditions to Use. and then select Hidden field. For Background Color. and click OK.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. click the color swatch.

Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. In the next lesson. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In later exercises. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. In this exercise. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. 7 Close the file with or without saving it.

Then. you modify air terminal parameters. In this lesson. After completing the air systems lesson. 79 . After system creation. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. As you place the air terminals. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you will create supply air systems. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. and work with the airflow schedule. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan.

4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .rvt. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the space crossing lines display. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. 3 In the ceiling view. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . click Training Files. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and scroll to space 223.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 .

10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. 9 On the Placement panel. Also. 17 Move the cursor down. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. and press Enter. and select M_Supply Diffuser . Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. If the host element is modified or moved. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. verify that Constrain is cleared. for Flow.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 13 On the Options Bar. The schedule updates with the new flow data. and press Enter. select the diffuser. enter 215 L/s. as shown. type 3600. and then press Esc to end the command. click Place on Face. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 .8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. the hosted elements are updated as well. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. and then select both Copy and Multiple. which in this case is the ceiling grid. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. 15 On the Options Bar.

Next.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 21 On the Options Bar. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 25 In the drawing area. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. 24 In the Open dialog. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. and click Open. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . as shown. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 29 Place 2 diffusers. select one of the diffusers. clear Leader. As you place the return diffusers.rfa. 22 In the drawing area. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. click Place on Face. 28 On the Placement tab. click Yes.

32 In the Project Browser. and click to select the lines. 31 In the alert dialog. select one of the return diffusers. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. Level. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. as shown.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. select Strong Reference. and click OK. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Reference. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. click Yes. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . under Other.

click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. 43 Using the same method. and then press Esc twice.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. select the vertical grid line as shown. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 40 In the drawing area. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. as shown. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. align the other return diffuser.

clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.44 While pressing Ctrl. and click Element Properties. 47 Using the same method. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. and press Enter. and click OK. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 310 L/s. right-click. for Flow. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . under Mechanical. and on the Options Bar. select both return diffusers. As you place the air terminals. clear LeftArrow. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.

4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden.Design ➤ Floor Plans. the space crossing lines display. expand HVAC .200 Neck. and double-click Level 1 . select M_Supply Diffuser . at the lower left corner of the building.HVAC Plan . and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 2 On the View Control Bar. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. for Scale. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. verify that Tag on Placement is selected.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . 10 In the drawing area. 9 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . When you highlight a space using the cursor. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click 1 : 100. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown.Design to make it the active view. 8 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. under Constraints. As a result. for Flow. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. Click OK. 11 Select the diffuser. enter 170 L/s. 15 Press Esc. enter 2400.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. Also. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. move the cursor down. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. for Offset. By copying the diffuser. type 6000. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. and then press Enter. Under Mechanical . you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser.Airflow. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing.

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers.16 Using the same method. and then press Esc. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. clear Leader. 18 On the Options Bar. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

27 In the schedule. 26 Using the method learned previously. under Available Fields. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. under space 115. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. select 21. select Mark. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). type. and Flow. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. for Flow. and press Enter. for Embedded Schedule. 29 Using the same method. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. it is a negative value. For Category. double-click System Type. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Sort by. Mark. under Other. enter 210 L/s. and click View Properties. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . click Edit. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Type. select Air Terminals. mark. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 25 Click OK 3 times. Next. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. and then right-click in the schedule. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. tile the windows.

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. and maximize Level 1 . The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . as shown. pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule.HVAC Plan . As you highlight the zone.Design. 31 In the drawing area.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . select M_WSHP .43 W (approximately 1. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command. 35 In the Type Selector. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531. 33 Click OK. verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955.32 Open the Instance Properties dialog.7-18 kW . 36 In the drawing area. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space.Horizontal . 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115.Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. and under Energy Analysis.3 times the heating load).High Efficiency .

Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. including energy analysis. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. However.HVAC Plan . you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. In this exercise. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design is highlighted. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. When you highlight a space. After creating the logical connection. You then create the logical connection between the system components. for Constraints ➤ Offset. enter . the space crossing lines display.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. As you add diffusers to systems. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 6 Keep the System Browser open. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. and click View ➤ Systems. right-click the title. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. 44 Zoom in to space 115. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. click Training Files.

select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 17 Using the method learned previously. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. the air terminals are the children. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. Connect Into. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 15 Click Cancel. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. the number of elements is updated. 11 In the drawing area. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. review the Number of Elements. 12 In the System Browser. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. and Flow value. On the Options Bar. and the system connects them. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. System Name. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 18 Click OK.

You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. In this exercise. which updates the name in the System Browser.Rename the system Next. 22 Click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 25 Click OK. In this exercise. 26 Click Finish Editing System. for System Name. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. for Mark. click Training Files. under Mechanical. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. under Identity Data. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation.

select Network. Also. the Network type provides several solutions. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. Select Branch. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. For Offset. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it.HVAC Plan. which provides various layout tools. for Solution Type. In this case. For Duct Type.Round. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions.Design is highlighted. click Settings. For Duct Type. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 7 On the Options Bar. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . For Offset. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. the space crossing lines display. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. enter 3000. 5 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. For Flex Duct Type. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. enter 3000. 4 In the drawing area. and display solution 1. select the upper left diffuser. A Generate Layout tab displays.

as is the elbow itself. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. For example. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. click Modify. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. select a different layout solution. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . or offset elevations are incorrect. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. as shown. Click OK. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. enter 900. you’ll get an error in a later step. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. Either relocate the system components. 11 Click Finish Layout. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. or manually modify the duct. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added.

Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. If the entire network does not highlight.Flow. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. thus it is not part of the system. fittings. Using a flow-based color scheme.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. and click OK. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. The first time you press Tab. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Usually. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. and equipment. select Duct Color Fill . This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. a disconnection exists. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. and click to select it. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. highlight a segment of the main duct. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. for Color Scheme.

19 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. and click OK. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. and then click OK. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. select By View. but not all values are used in this view. and press Enter. for Flow. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. select the WSHP.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. 20 In the drawing area. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area.Airflow. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and on the Options Bar. for Values Displayed. under Mechanical . under Graphics. select one of the diffusers in the system. 17 In the Type Properties dialog.

and then click to select it. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. for Schemes. select the color scheme legend. and then press Esc to clear the selection. Select the upper segment of main duct. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area.65 Pa/m. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and enter . Select Only. for Branch Sizing.Velocity. and drag it to the right. select Calculated Size Only.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. select Duct Color Fill . and select 400. 26 Click OK. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Select Restrict Height. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. highlight a segment of the duct. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. select Friction. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. Under Constraints. Click OK. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. click Cancel.

static pressure. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Using this tool. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). Use the information that displays (flow. pressure. and pressure loss. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system.The ductwork and fittings are updated. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.

click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. also known as the critical path. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE As you inspect a system. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 35 Click Finish. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system.

3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).HVAC Plan . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Draw Duct. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.Design is highlighted.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and select the WSHP.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . indicating that it’s the active view.

11 On the Options Bar. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 14 In the Project Browser. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. right-click the connector grip. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. NOTE When drawing duct. for Offset. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. and click Draw Duct.3D MEP. Front. 15 On the ViewCube. select the top right diffuser. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. double-click MEP . Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. enter 3000. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click the corner where the Top.

Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct).Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 19 In the drawing area. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. it is considered a closed loop. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. in space 115. The ductwork is automatically created.

Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 24 Select the remaining diffusers. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. You can ignore the warning. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. 25 Press Esc.22 Using the same method.

33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 30 Press Esc twice. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then click Modify. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting.

under Constraints. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. clear Restrict Height. under Mechanical .Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 41 Close the file with or without saving it. for Flow. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 40 Using the same method. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. select a segment of the main duct. and click to select it. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and click OK. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . and then click OK. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. such as a plenum. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct.Airflow. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run.

108 .

Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. on level 3 of the building model. In this lesson. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Create return and supply piping systems. 109 . you place mechanical equipment. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Automatically and manually lay out piping. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. and a cooling tower located on the roof. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. including 2 base mounted pumps. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Then.

Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Horizontal High Efficiency .HVAC Plan . 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Left Return . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and select M_WSHP . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown.7-18kW .Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. in corridor 328. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.

10 Select the WSHP. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. as shown. verify that Wall faces is selected. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . click the top edge of the WSHP. and enter 600. click the dimension. 7 On the Options Bar. and click to place the dimension. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 8 Click the corridor wall face.

11 Press Enter and then press Esc. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. and in the Type Selector. as shown. verify that the WSHP is still selected.) 14 Click Modify. select the 2 WSHPs. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first.

Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. and click to place it in the mechanical room. enter 2750.75 L/s. for Offset. Under Mechanical. enter 0. for Water Flow. Click OK. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. as shown. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. 21 Click Modify.

A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Unlike logical connections (systems). Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. analyses cannot be performed. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. but without a corresponding system. you create the return and supply piping systems. Create pipes to physically connect the system components.22 Close the file with or without saving it. including flow and pressure. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. You can create pipes to connect system components. Create the logical connection between the system components.

Creating a Piping System | 115 .Mech 330). right-click the Systems column heading. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Assigning a system component to an existing system. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. select the 2 WSHPs. where it is easier to review the information.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. This display indicates that the system is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Therefore. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. while pressing Ctrl. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. click Training Files. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.rvt. As you assign equipment to systems. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. and click View ➤ Piping. In the System Browser. 5 In the System Browser. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC Plan . all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen.

116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 13 Click Finish Editing System. Notice that on the Options Bar. 12 In the drawing area. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. 17 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. and the Edit System tool is not active.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. You have created the hydronic return system. for System Name. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. select the boiler.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. for System Name.

22 In the Select Connector dialog. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. and bypasses the cooling tower. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. under Design ➤ HVAC . and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 26 Click Finish Editing System. double-click Roof . and click OK. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs.HVAC Plan . 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 25 Select the boiler. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. and select the cooling tower. In cooling mode.Design. 19 In the Project Browser. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return).18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 23 Close the roof plan view. In heating mode.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Creating a Piping System | 117 . IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH.

You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. expand Piping. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. for Water Flow.8. and click OK. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. 28 Using the same method. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. and click Select. expand the Hydronic Return system category.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. under Mechanical. you can view several parameters. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. enter 0. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. and click OK. and click Column Settings. In the System Browser. and click Expand All. and click Properties. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. You also manually modify the layout path as required. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. 32 In the System Browser. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). indicating the logical connection. including the flow rate and size of the component. 29 Right-click CHWS.

8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Design is highlighted. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and click to select it. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). you can place the cursor over a system component. and click OK.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. the boiler. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. select Mechanical Equipment. press Tab to highlight the system. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps.HVAC Plan . 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. click Check None. click Training Files.rvt. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. 5 In the Filter dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. A system preview displays in red. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . then the Select a System dialog displays. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing.Mech 330). When you draw a box to select components. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP.

The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. enter 450. For Inset. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. click Settings. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. select Perimeter. select CHWR. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. It does not reference the architecture. 11 On the Options Bar. verify that Solutions is selected. duct.9 In the Select a System dialog. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. or architectural components. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 10 Click OK. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 13 Click Cancel. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. structural beams. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles.

18 Place the cursor over the piping. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment.16 Click Finish Layout.75 L/s. 19 In the drawing area. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. the flow for each WSHP is 0. to display the path with thinner lines. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. 17 Optionally. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. With each Tab. and press Tab 3 times. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs.

notice that the Water Flow is 1. and click OK. 22 Select the boiler. verify that the value for Flow is 1.50 L/s. 23 Under Mechanical. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .75 L/s). under Mechanical. and click OK. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left.50 L/s. and access its instance properties. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 24 Press Esc.

31 Close the Level 1 plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). On the Options Bar. click Edit System. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 32 Click Finish Editing System. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. the Number of Elements is now 8. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. Logically.Design. 28 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 27 On the System Tools panel. double-click Level 1 . and zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. you physically close the CHWR loop.50 L/s. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. access its instance properties. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. under Mechanical. Next. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. as shown. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . note that the value for Flow is 4. which propagates flow throughout the system. so the total flow of 6. 35 Using the drag control.44 L/s. and click Cancel.94 L/s. 38 Using the same method. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.94 L/s.

44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select CHWS. select a WSHP. For Inset. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. select Perimeter 1 of 5. For Slope. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . 41 Click OK. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.00%.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. enter 0. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). enter 450. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 40 In the Select a System dialog. and then click OK. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. Click Settings.

) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. 47 In the drawing area. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. In a later exercise. 48 While pressing Ctrl. 46 Click Modify. as shown. (Both sections are at the same elevation.

You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. 50 Using the same method. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. Either relocate the system components. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. To create the piping system. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. or offset elevations are incorrect. as shown. select a different layout solution. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). or manually modify the pipe. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . 51 Click Finish Layout. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise.

you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. double-click 3D Building. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop.Design ➤ 3D Views. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. As you work in the training file. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. as shown. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. and the return pipes are magenta. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.HVAC Plan . click Training Files. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.Design is highlighted. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

7 In the plan view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 .Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. as shown. 6 Press Delete. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. select the section of piping.

■ Click to move the piping. Click to specify the reference point. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 9 In the 3D view. and press Esc to clear the selection. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. select the boiler.

select the return pipe riser. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . The connections are automatically created. 12 In the 3D view. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. and click OK. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and click Draw Pipe. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system.11 In the Select Connector dialog. 13 In the plan view. select the boiler. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. and the lower one is secondary.

and press Enter. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector.In a plan view. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. enter 600. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and you select 1 connector. enter 381. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. ■ Move the cursor down. for Offset. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector.

it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. As you place piping runs that are close together. and click OK. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. and the appropriate fittings are created. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. select the primary base mounted pump. 19 In the plan view. 18 Press Esc twice.

Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click Draw Pipe. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you select the tee fitting. and click the minus symbol. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. as shown.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. and select it. and click to draw the pipe. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. right-click the bottom connector.

click to connect to the pump. and when the connector point displays.27 Move the cursor to the right. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .

and click to create the pipe. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .28 Press Esc. 31 On the Options Bar. for Offset. select the primary base mounted pump. right-click the discharge connector. 29 If necessary. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. enter 1200. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections.

Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . these pipe connections were created automatically.33 Press Esc.

select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. as shown. right-click the bottom control on the tee. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. 35 Using the method learned previously. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.

and click to create the pipe.■ Move the cursor down. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . for Offset. enter 2850. and press Enter. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. type 300. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown.

140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .37 Click Modify. You now have a closed loop system. you validate the flow through the system. Next.

When you create the pumps in parallel. 43 Press Esc. view the properties for the secondary pump. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. The flow is being propagated through the piping. the value is 0 L/s.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. select the cooling tower. 44 In the 3D view. notice that under Mechanical. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. for Cooling Water Flow. 48 In the plan view. and click OK.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. 42 Click OK. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. which is rounded up to 3. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. notice that Flow is 6.50 or 50% of the Flow.44 L/s. under Mechanical. 41 Using the same method. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 40 Click Cancel. right-click. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . right-click. and click Element Properties. Connect the cooling tower Next. 46 Press Esc. under Mechanical. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also.44 L/s).

■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Lower pipe (outlet).

and close the dialog.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.44 L/s. 49 Press Esc. 50 In the 3D View. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 . 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. select the cooling tower.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.52 Close the file with or without saving it.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. the water bypasses the cooling tower.rvt. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.Design is highlighted. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. When the valve is open.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Adding Valves In this exercise. and is heated by the boiler. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m.

Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 8 Press Esc twice.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.4 On the Options Bar. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. Adding Valves | 145 . verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. The bypass valve is closed by default. and select M_Ball Valve .

parallel to the previously placed valve. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 12 Select M_Ball Valve .50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 14 Using the same method.10 Press Esc. place another M_Ball Valve .

15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. verify that Flow is 0 L/s.44 L/s. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate that the Flow is 6. Adding Valves | 147 . right-click. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. and click OK. 19 Using the same method. under Mechanical. and click Element Properties.

The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 20 Select the bypass valve. 22 Using the method you just learned. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. Sizing Pipe In this exercise.44 L/s. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. and select M_Ball Valve . you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select M_Ball Valve . (This valve allows the water to flow through it.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.44 L/s. Initially. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. validate that the Flow is 6. In heating mode. click Training Files. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position).

and click OK.Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan . and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Sizing Pipe | 149 . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system.Size. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . for Schemes. select Pipe Color Fill .Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown.Flow. and click OK. click Pipe Color Fill .

Under Constraints. or manually modify the pipe. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select Friction. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. enter 1. and enter 220 Pa/m.5 m/s. for Branch Sizing. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. Either relocate the system components. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. or offset elevations are incorrect. and for Velocity. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 13 Press Esc. and click to select the branch. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. select a different layout solution. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Click OK. Select And.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps.

Inspecting the System | 151 . and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. and double-click 3D Building. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. pressure.rvt. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Using the System Inspector. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m.14 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. Inspecting the System In this exercise.Design ➤ 3D Views. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level.

Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. as required. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. flow. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . An inspection flag reports the section number. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. and pressure information including pressure loss. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. as shown.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. This information helps you modify the system design. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection).

Checking Piping Systems | 153 .Design. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. the Static Pressure is 41916. and the Pressure Loss is 7160.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.rvt. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m.7. 9 Using the same method.HVAC Plan . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and to size pipe. 10 Click Finish. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project.4 Pa. Warnings display. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. select 32° C. targeting those systems that need attention.Note that the Flow is 1. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans. for Fluid Temperature. you need to validate them. inspect Section 6 again.0 L/s. and double-click Level 3 . and click OK.1 Pa. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. 11 Close the file with or without saving it.

The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click View. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. If you place components without assigning them to a system. right-click the Systems titlebar. and confirm unassigned system components. and select Level 3 . Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. In the System Browser. 12 In the System Browser. For example. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected.Design. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. and for pipe sizing. After you have assigned all components to systems. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. and click Expand All. the pipe is associated with that system. 10 Using the same methods. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 9 Right-click CHWS. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. 6 In the Project Browser. right-click Hydronic Return. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. After you assign components to a system. thus assigning the components to a system. and click Show to view all of the system components.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. 4 In the System Browser. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked.Design floor plan. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . As you learned when placing components. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. click Close. TIP If you have multiple views open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand the Unassigned folder.HVAC Plan . 7 In the System Browser. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. otherwise. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. double-click Level 1 .

and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 14 Using the methods that you learned. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. Checking Piping Systems | 155 .13 Right-click CHWR.

156 .

157 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

158 .

Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Define required lighting.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.

Click OK.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Copper. For Material.04. Select Correction Factor. and demand factors that are applied in the design. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. ■ ■ For Material. ■ Click New Correction Factor. click (Open). Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. wiring. distribution systems. enter 70. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name.Wire Sizes. speeding up the design phase. In this exercise you review electrical settings. For Temperature. expand Wiring . For Factor. click Training Files. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. You also add a wiring type. As you place components and create circuits. enter 1. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Copper. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. enter THHN. select 90. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. select Wiring Types. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane.

By specifying a range. For Insulation. For Max Size. select Steel. select 240. select Voltage Definitions. select THHN. enter 1. For L-L Voltage. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. enter 50. select 10000 VA. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building.0.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. For L-G Voltage. Under More Than. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . For Phase. select Distribution Systems. enter 220. enter 240. select Hot Conductor Size. select Single. Select Neutral Required. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. For Value. For Conduit Type. For Neutral Multiplier. select Power. For Wires. enter 240. Click Split. For Minimum. select 120. select 75. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Neutral Size. select 3. enter 2000. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. Click OK. enter 250. select Demand Factors. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. enter 120/240. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. For Maximum.

select Spaces. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. For Discipline. For Type of Parameter. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Electrical . Later in the tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Add. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Click OK twice. 5 In the drawing area. and double-click Level 2 . and conference rooms. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.rvt. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. For Group Parameter Under. under the Electrical .Lighting Plan. such as offices. Under Categories. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . because the key is linked to your new project parameter.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. select Illuminance.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. select Electrical.Lighting group in the space element properties. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Verify that Instance is selected.Lighting. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. click Training Files. restrooms. enter Required Lighting Level. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. In this case the key style is the type of space and. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). click (Open).

For Name. and click OK. enter Open Office. Click OK. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. enter 485. double-click Required Lighting Level. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. select Spaces. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings.Lighting. under Available Fields. enter Lighting Levels. Click OK. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. Select Schedule Keys. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. under Electrical . 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Space Lighting Requirements. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and for Key Name.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. Notice that as you enter the data. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Select Blank Line. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. select Required Lighting Level.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type.Lighting Plan. which is mapped to project units. 22 Using the same method. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . change the sort order back to the default setting. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. 21 Click OK twice. for Sorting/Grouping.

The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. Later in this exercise. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. for Lighting Levels. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. select Instruction-Standard. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. under Identity Data. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. the value input applies only to the selected space. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. 27 Click OK.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click (Open). In this exercise. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.

Select the scheme for 450. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. select Spaces. Select the scheme for 500 lx. and click (Add Value) five times. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. enter Required Lighting Levels. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition.00 lx. and in the At Least column. 00 lx still selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. enter 200.rvt. enter Required Lighting and click OK. select Required Lighting Level. For Color.00.00 lx. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. for Category. and click (Add Value).00 lx. click (Add Value) again. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. and press ENTER. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. then the new value will be 400 lx. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. For example. for Name. click Training Files. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. click (Duplicate). and press ENTER. for Title. ■ Click OK. Under Schemes. enter 800. verify the By Range is selected.00. Select the scheme for At Least 20. and press Enter. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 900. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m.

and Required Lighting Level. enter Lighting Delta. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. For Name. select Required Lighting. Click OK. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Spaces. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. Level. and double-click Level 2 . enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. Average Estimated Illumination. 8 In the drawing area. For Color Scheme. For Type. select Electrical.Lighting CF. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 13 Click Calculated Value. For Discipline. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . Name. select Spaces. for Available Fields. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting .Design ➤ Floor Plans. select Illuminance. double-click Number.

select Lighting Delta. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. On the Formatting tab. Click OK. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. Select Header. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. for Sort by. click Browse. press the spacebar. For Value. and click Browse. for Formula. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. select Level. Click OK twice. for Fields. type a hyphen. Select Blank Line.■ For Formula. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. for Custom Colors. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. select Red. under Condition. Click Conditional Format. select Required Lighting Level. select Not Between. select Average Estimated Illumination. for Test. Click Background Color. Click OK three times.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 . 16 Close the file with or without saving it.The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red.

170 .

171 . and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Create power loads. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. power circuits. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Create a panel schedule. Use the System Browser to check your design. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. as you place lighting fixtures. First. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Then.

4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. By using orange as the color for this range. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select the color for Less Than 200 lx. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . You can create additional color schemes. 7 In the Project Browser. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. for Basic Colors. 8 In the Project Browser. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.Lighting Ceiling plan. for the Spaces Category. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. Click OK. select Orange. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . click (Open). 2 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. select Average Estimated Illumination.rvt. click Training Files. In the Color dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the color legend.Lighting CF view is open. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Under Scheme Definition. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . indicating a value greater than 0 fc. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. 13 Click the Level 2 .5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. which is the lowest value in the specified range. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). zoom to space Library 219. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. all three of these colored fields will clear to white.

The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .5 fc range is satisfied. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. the fixtures will move accordingly. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 19 Press ESC to end the command. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.the +/. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. In the Space Lighting Analysis view.277V. 18 Click to place the fixture. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog.5 fc range. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

■ Under Electrical Loads. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the Name dialog. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.00 VA. for Apparent Load. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. for Name enter and click OK. enter 162. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. scroll to view space space Library 219. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

93. specify 15000. and Receptacles | 183 . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP.rvt. for Color Preset. ■ Click Apply. for Lamp. 2 In the drawing area. Junction Boxes.85. junction boxes. click the value for Initial Intensity. for Type Mark.00 lm. ■ Click OK twice. select Xenon and click OK. Under Photometrics. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Placing Switches. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. In the next exercise. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the value for Light Loss Factor.ies and click Open. Under Electrical. select T5 [HO]. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. select Luminous Flux. select 463T5_S. 9 In space Library 219. click Training Files. Placing Switches. Under Photometrics. Click OK. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. enter . enter F15. select the top center fixture. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. click the value for Initial Color. ■ Under Photometrics. for Ballast Loss Factor. Junction Boxes.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. In the Select File dialog. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. and receptacles to your design. you add switches. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. click (Open). 12 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. enter . Under Photometrics. ■ In the Initial Color dialog.

it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 7 Click to place the switch. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.277V.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor .Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .

12 In the Load Family dialog. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Select M_Junction Boxes . Placing Switches. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.NoLoad. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 185 . 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.rfa and click Open. The element type M_Junction Boxes .

for Mark. Click OK twice. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. 21 In the drawing area. Under Electrical. for Level 2 . Click Edit Type.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box.Offset. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. NOTE When entering values.14 Press ESC to end the command. zoom to space Library 219. 15 Select the junction box. enter JB-1NL. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. enter 2750. note the Number of Poles is 1. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . In the Type Properties dialog. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . you can enter a space to separate the unit values.

Click OK. 23 In the System Browser. Space Name. Distribution System. and Voltage. Junction Boxes. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Expand General. 26 In the System Browser. 24 For any column. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Placing Switches. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. right-click and click Column Settings. NOTE If necessary. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Select Load. Expand Electrical. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. and Receptacles | 187 .22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and Number of Elements. Space Number. Select Size.

188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 31 Close the System Browser. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown.

Junction Boxes. move the cursor along the wall. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and Receptacles | 189 . Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. select Copy and Multiple. 38 Select the receptacle. and enter 3650 and press ENTER.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Placing Switches. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 40 On the Options Bar.

enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 43 Press ESC to end the command.42 Move the cursor down.

Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Placing Switches. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.

Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

and work toward the higher voltage.Surface: 100A. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. click (Open). 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. zoom to the space Electrical 220. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m.rvt. 2 In the drawing area. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.208V MCB . In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings.equipment. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Adding wiring to a project is optional. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).

Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values.Loads.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. For Panel Name. 9 On the Options Bar. Click OK. #1 Pole Breakers. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 15 On the Options Bar. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 14 Select the panelboard. enter LP-2B. enter PP-2B. select 480/277 Wye.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 8 Select the panelboard. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.480V MCB . Click OK.Loads. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Max. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Distribution System. for Distribution System. enter 20. #1 Pole Breakers. enter 20. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. for Max. select 120/208 Wye. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. For Panel Name.

21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 20 In the drawing area. Click OK. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and for Category. click Check None. zoom to space Instruction 221. 23 In the Filter dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . which is the logical connection between the elements.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 .Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser.

196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 28 Press ESC to end the command. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .

32 Press ESC. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 33 Select the switch on the right.31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 38 Press ESC to end the command. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.35 Select the left three-way switch. 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

rvt. Next you create circuits without showing wire. click Training Files. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 2. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. select Wires. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. for Hot Conductors. Click OK. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. Click OK.39 Using the same method. and for Category. except without wire. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Loads. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 2 In the drawing area. click Check None. and create permanent wiring. 42 In the Filter dialog. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click (Open).

15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Distribution System. and then expand circuit 1. Click OK. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Voltage. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. and Voltage Drop are selected. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. ■ 16 In the System Browser. Rating. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 13 In the System Browser. expand Power. Expand Electrical. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. right-click on the Systems heading. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. and verify that Load.

28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 22 With the junction box still selected. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 30 Close the System Browser.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. under Electrical. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . change the Voltage to 277V. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Click Tags. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 44 In the Edit Label dialog. enter FR4. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. select Break. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. Click OK. For Circuit Number. 40 Click OK twice. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 35 Press ESC to end the command. click below the first one to place it. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 47 In the drawing area. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. for Type Mark.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click Edit Type. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. Click Yes. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. under Identity Data. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard.

Next you create a switch system. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and click Apply. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. enter a comma. 54 Select all of the tags. Click OK. Click OK. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 57 In the Filter dialog. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 52 In the Save As dialog.rvt. Click Save. select Lighting Fixture Tags. click Check None. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. and for Category. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for File Name. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Training Files. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. Click OK. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. click (Open).rfa. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All.

14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 2 In the drawing area. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Electrical Lighting. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. enter a.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. Click OK. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. for Switch ID. Creating a Switch System | 205 .

15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. under Electrical . 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.Lighting. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. Click OK. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. for switch ID. enter b. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.

for Hot Conductors. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. click Check None. Click OK. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. lighting. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. click Training Files. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. and click Element Properties.rvt. under Electrical . 2 In the drawing area. Next you create a circuit and size wire. enter 2. Circuits are used for power. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. select the PP-2B panel. and data systems. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. Click OK. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m.26 Close the file with or without saving it.Loads. click (Open). and for Category. 4 In the Filter dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Electrical Fixtures. 7 In space Electrical 220.

select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and in the drawing area. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222.rfa. select Wiring. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. 19 Click OK. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. and in the right pane. and click to select the circuit. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark.13 Select the wire again. and click Open. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.

in space Instruction 221. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 26 Press Delete.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 29 In space Instruction 221. click the connector of the first receptacle. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. select the PP-2B panel. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. as shown. Creating Power Loads | 209 . add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. as shown. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. 28 In the drawing area. 22 In space Electrical 220.

and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Next you balance the loads for your design. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns.

the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. the distribution is shifted. for Rating. 2 In the drawing area. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. zoom to space Electrical 220.rvt. Under Electrical-Loads. Scroll down. 1-#10. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. click Open. 6 Click OK. 1-#12. 3 In the Electrical space. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Had there been a greater imbalance.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. click Training Files. click Rebalance Loads. 1-#12. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . select panel LP-2B. Finally. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. After re-balancing loads. Click OK. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 1-#10. enter 30A.

26 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a panel schedule.Loads. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 17 Close the warning dialog. for Rating. enter 25A. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and click OK. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. under Electrical . 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. enter 40A. under Electrical . 12 Select panel PP-2B. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 15 Select panel PP-2B. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 24 Click Select Panel. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.Loads. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. and click OK. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 14 Close the warning dialog. for Rating. select the transformer TP-2B. and click Finish Editing Circuit. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B.

Under Header Text. select Bold and Italic. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. enter 4 mm. for Font. enter 5 mm. expand Sheets (all). click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 6 In the Project Browser. for Font Size.Panel Schedules. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. Under Body Text. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. The Panel Schedule Report displays. click Edit. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. Under Header Text. select Berlin Sans FB. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. Click OK. for Appearance. click (Open). 10 Click OK twice. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. under Other. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. 4 Close the report. for Font Size. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. click Training Files. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel.rvt. Select PP-2B. drag PP-2B onto the sheet.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. and open E601 . 5 In the Project Browser.

click Training Files. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. select space Lounge 212. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser.rvt. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Expand Unassigned. each with a load of 180VA. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. click (Open). In the System Browser. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. press TAB once. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall.

Checking Your Design | 215 . expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. under Warnings. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 17 In the drawing area. for Panel. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 16 Close the details dialog. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. zoom to space Electrical 214. 15 In the dialog. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 20 On the Options Bar. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 Select panel LP-2C. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. select MDP-1. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. In the System Browser. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated.

216 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. 4 In the Name dialog. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. and click OK. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.Vent. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.Plumbing Plan . In this lesson.rvt. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. Adding a pipe size. and click Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. and verify that Level 1 . 219 . you create a PVC pipe type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Sanitary. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. type PVC .Design is open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. in addition to loading existing families. right-click PVC . planning is critical to a successful design. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. In this exercise.

under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 21 In the right pane.006 mm. and click Main. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type.DWV.Vent is listed. select Sanitary. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 46.PVC . click Training Files. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. under Mechanical. and open Metric\M_Trap P . 17 In the left pane.000 mm. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. click Pipe Settings. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. Tap. 26 Click OK. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. select Sanitary. enter 45. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. enter 10°. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent .5 In the Type Properties dialog. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. Tee. 13 In the right panel.Sch 40 . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. For Offset. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . enter -1250. 27 For the new pipe size. select Plastic. 10 On the Selection panel. under Pipe Types.rfa. 24 For Inside Diameter.DWV: Standard. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. select M_Tee Sanitary . 15 For System Type. 6 Click OK. select None. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. and click OK. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 25 For Outside. Cross. for Material.PVC . select Tee. 22 Click New Size. select Branch.293 mm. enter 54.Sch 40 .Sch 40 . 18 For System Type. PVC .PVC . 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. In the Project Browser. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. for Nominal. click Modify. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.DWV: Standard.

add a hot water heater. 221 . Create the sanitary plumbing system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. including plumbing fixtures. and hot and cold water piping. vent. Create the hot water system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. sanitary piping. Create the cold water system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. The base is placed. A preview of the piping layout displays. and click OK. as shown. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. select Sanitary 107. 16 In the Select a System dialog. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . a toilet. for example. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. select one of the components in the system.

select Branch. click Solutions. 28 On the Options Bar. for Solution Type. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 23 For Pipe Type.Sanitary. select PVC . 25 In the left pane. You accept this suggested solution. select Intersections. 20 On the Generate Layout panel.19 On the Options Bar. and modify it to meet project requirements. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. 29 On the Options Bar. and click Settings. and click OK. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. 27 For Offset.Sanitary. enter -1225. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. for Slope. enter 1. 26 For Pipe Type. 21 On Options Bar. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. and for Offset. enter -350 mm. 30 Click Modify. 24 For Offset. for Diameter. The default settings are automatically modified.05%. select Main. select PVC . enter -350 mm. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. select 100 mm.

32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). select the vertical route path segments.Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.

34 Click Modify. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. use the ViewCube to orient the view.33 In the 3D view. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.

Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.36 Using the previous method. click Finish Layout. 37 On the Generate Layout panel.

Overall. When a fitting is reversed. select the fitting and click to reorient it. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.

and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. you continue with the work from the last exercise. adding sinks in the men’s room. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and check the slope control. as shown.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting.

2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). as shown. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. in the Type Selector.Rectangular. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. select 560 mmx560 mm . Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. click Training Files. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. 4 On the Element panel. under M_Lavatory .Plumbing Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line.Public. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Design is open. and verify that Level 1 . 5 On the Placement panel.

■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. enter 711.2. 8 Select the sink. and press Enter to create a second sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . select Multiple.7 Click Modify. On the Options Bar. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point.

select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 11 In the System Browser. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. click Add To System. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 12 In the drawing area. Press Esc. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. and press Enter to create the third sink.2. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. enter 711.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . In the System Browser. 21 Select the tee. under Design ➤ Plumbing . and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser.Overall. double-click 3D Plumbing . and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click Finish Editing System. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 20 Select the fitting.Design ➤ 3D Views. 19 In the 3D view.16 On the Edit System panel.

enter 1. for Slope. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 24 On the Options Bar. for Offset. and click to draw the pipe. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 27 Click Modify.05%. with the tee fitting selected. 26 On the Options Bar. and click Apply. and click Draw Pipe. press Spacebar. When you press the Spacebar.22 In the plan view. enter 760 mm. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. move the cursor over the stub pipe.Sch 40 . select Standard. 32 Select the double wye fitting. 30 In the 3D view.DWV. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . 29 In the Type Selector. and when the vertical center line displays. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 31 Click Modify.PVC . click to place the fitting.

on the Options Bar. 34 Press Esc. double-click the section head to open the section view. right-click the right connector. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. zoom in to the double wye fitting. you add pipe segments to the double wye. and press Enter. 37 Select the fitting. for Offset. enter 305 mm. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 36 In the section view. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe.33 With the fitting selected. In the next steps. and press Enter. enter 150 mm. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. and click to place the pipe. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 42 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . as shown. 40 Click Modify.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink.

and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. press Spacebar. and press Esc. enter 150 mm. and click Draw Pipe. 46 In the section view. right-click the bottom connector. 48 Click Modify. 49 Using the same method.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 47 Move the cursor down. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.Sch 40 . click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.PVC . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 52 In the plan view. 55 In the 3D view. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected.DWV. 56 Using the same method. select Standard. select the P-Trap on the left. 51 In the Type Selector. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 54 Click Modify. 53 Using the same method. under M_Trap P . and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.

connect the right sink to the double wye. Select the double wye pipe on the left. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Move the cursor to the left. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select the left P-Trap. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. enter 150 mm. Click in the plan view.. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Click Modify. 58 Using the same method. and press Enter. and click Draw Pipe. In the plan view.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . click Finish to select the recommended solution. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. under Pipe Types. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks.■ In the 3D view. In the Type Selector. On the Routing Solutions panel. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. Press Esc. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. as shown. select PVC Sanitary. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. while pressing Ctrl. select the section of pipe you just drew. while pressing Ctrl. and select a proposed solution.

and verify the slope. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. click Training Files.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . adjusting the sanitary stack. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 62 On the Options Bar. click Finish.rvt. verify that 1. for Slope.05% is selected. 65 Close the file with or without saving it.

select the vertical stack.Overall.Plumbing Plan . and click to draw the pipe. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Floor level line. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . and click Draw Pipe. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend .DWV. and click the intersection to place the fitting. as shown.PVC .Design. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 5 Select the tee.Sch 40 . 9 In the Type Selector. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. select Standard. select the elbow fitting on the right. right-click the top connector.Design. 7 On the Selection panel. click Modify. 3 In the Section view. 10 In the 3D view.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).43 In the 3D view. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. 265 .

266 .

you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. If the tutorial training files are not present.autodesk. However. In this tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this lesson. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. go to http://www. click Training Files. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. and click Duplicate.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you can choose to save your work. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. 2 Right-click Standard. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. You create a new pipe type.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.rvt. After finishing each exercise. 267 . This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise.

NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. or architectural components. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. In the left pane. For Pipe Type. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. Next. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. 6 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. for Material. In the next exercise. verify that 2800 is specified. duct. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. In this exercise. you create project parameters and work with schedules. structural beams. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. For Pipe Type. select Fire Protection Wet. For Offset. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. verify that 2800 is selected. select Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For System Type. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. select Main. you modify the type properties of the pipe. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. and click Properties. select Carbon Steel. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. click Rename. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. 9 Click OK. However. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. and enter Fire Protection Wet. For Offset. under Mechanical.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 5 In the Type Properties dialog.

under Fire Protection. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 6 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. select space Instruction 221 as shown. click Add.Fire Protection Piping Plan . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . Under Categories. the space crossing lines display. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. 5 Click OK twice.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select the upper half of the building. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. enter Sprinkler Zone. For Group parameter under. for Sprinkler Zone. right-click. 8 Using a crossing window.rvt. and then click OK. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Fire Protection. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Spaces. for Name. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog.Design is highlighted. enter Zone 1. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. and click Element Properties.

15 Press Esc to clear the selection.rvt. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. you create schedules for sprinkler design. for Sprinkler Zone. under Fire Protection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 Using the same method. and then click OK. 10 In the Filter dialog. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. to which you add various parameters. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. including a calculated value parameter. and click OK.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. verify that only Spaces are selected. and then access instance properties. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files. enter Zone 2. under Fire Protection. select Zone 1.

For Key name. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. enter Maximum Spacing. double-click on each column separator.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Add Parameter. 7 Click OK. The schedule displays. select Length.Design is highlighted. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. and on the ribbon. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Obstructed-Combustible. Select Schedule keys. For Unit symbol. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. For Units. select 0 decimal places. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click the Formatting tab. For Name. for Name. select Millimeters. Click OK. For Group parameter under. select Spaces. select Fire Protection. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . and click Field Format. enter Protection Area Construction Type. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. indicating that it’s the active view. For Type of Parameter. enter Light. 10 In the Format dialog. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 14 Select the new header. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 6 Using the same method. 9 On the Formatting tab. select mm. For Rounding. select Maximum Spacing. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. 11 Click OK twice.

Unobstructed Ordinary. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Click OK. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. enter 4575. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. enter Sprinkler Schedule. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and press Enter. For Name. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . based on the parameter settings you specified previously. select Spaces. enter 40. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. In the Maximum Coverage Area column.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Extra.

The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list).Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. under Available fields. enter Minimum Sprinklers. select 0 decimal place. For Type. select Fixed. 22 Click OK twice. and click Field Format. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. 20 On the Formatting tab. In the Fields dialog. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Click OK. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. select Number. For Rounding. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. Enter the formula operator / after Area. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. For Units. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Common. click . For Discipline. and click OK. select Area. For Formula. 19 Click the Formatting tab.

select Hidden field. select Grand totals. and select Totals only. under Other. verify that Use default settings is selected. click Edit. For Then by (second instance). The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Sprinkler Zone. At the bottom of the dialog. select Sprinkler Zone. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Click OK 3 times. ■ In the Format dialog. select Level. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. Select Header and Blank line. and then click Field Format. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Number. For Fields. for Sort by. select Level.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. Under Field formatting. For Then by. Select Header and Blank line. and click View Properties. For Fields. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and then select Hidden field. for Sorting/Grouping.

and select Totals only. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. For Category. select Sprinklers. select Level equals Level 2. select Embedded Schedule. for Filter. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. for Embedded Schedule. 30 Click OK twice. right-click the schedule. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. select Grand totals. and click View Properties. delete the word Maximum. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. under Other.27 In the drawing area. and Count. and click View Properties. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. click Edit. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. select Count. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Fields. for Available fields. System Name. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. On the Formatting tab. select Calculate totals. click Edit. for Filter by. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. Under Field formatting. double-click Type.

under Identity Data. Unobstructed. select Ordinary. for Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed. 48 In the floor plan. select Light. 41 In the plan view.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser.Fire Protection Plan Design. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. under Identity Data. 46 With the space still selected. select Ordinary. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. select space 221 Instruction. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and the spacing parameter values are evident. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 50 Access the instance properties. for Protection Area Construction Type. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 43 Click Cancel. select space 221 Instruction. but their values are not determined. As a result. 52 Click OK. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. double-click FP . and access the instance properties. Unobstructed. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. under Identity Data. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 44 In the schedule. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. After finishing each exercise. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.autodesk. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. and double-click Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. As you place the sprinklers. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. At the end of this tutorial. 279 . By following the recommended workflow. If the tutorial training files are not present. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view.rvt. you will understand the process. As you create the system. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. However. methodology. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. go to http://www.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. you can choose to save your work. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. click Training Files.

6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. When this happens. 3 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. When there is a small misalignment. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. After placing the initial sprinkler.

and 207. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 9 In space Instruction 202. verify that Constrain is cleared. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 11 In the drawing area. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 10 Press Esc twice. 206. as shown. and click to place 3 sprinklers. Also. select the sprinklers that you placed. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. while pressing Ctrl. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. 13 On the Options Bar. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. and that Copy and Multiple are selected.

282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . as shown. 200B. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Fire Protection Piping Plan .Design. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. and then press Esc. and 200C). open Design ➤ FP . 18 Type WT.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. you place non-hosted sprinklers. specify a vertical offset. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. you place non-hosted sprinklers. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. 17 In the Project Browser. Next.

Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . This number is determined in the schedule. and click Element Properties. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . and then creating the logical connection between these system components. In this exercise. for Offset. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. 23 Right-click the sprinkler.FP_Ceiling view. 25 Click OK. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. move the cursor to the right. you adjust the offset. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. under Constraints. Next. In the next exercise. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Number. 29 Press Esc. enter 4100. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). After creating the logical connection. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. enter 11. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 22 In the 200A Corridor space.0. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. and with piping (physical connection).19 In the floor plan. enter 2900 mm. Notice that the schedule updates. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. and press Enter. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate.

they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Fire Protection Plan . 5 Right-click the header. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. and select Piping.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. click Training Files. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. indicating that it’s the active view. 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted. Unlike logical connections (systems). 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. click View ➤ Systems. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. As you assign sprinklers to systems. However.

named Fire Protection Wet. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. 11 With the system still selected. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . indicating the logical connection. within the Piping Systems folder. In the System Browser. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. place the cursor over a sprinkler. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. Next. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. press Tab. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. Creating a Piping System | 285 . and click Select. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. and select the system. select an initial piping layout.

286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select Branch. click Solutions. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. as shown. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2.Wet is selected. 15 In the drawing area. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. enter FP Wet_Zone2. and number of elements in the system. 12 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. The Generate Layout tools are activated.0 is specified. When the layout is finished. providing system editing tools. 22 On the Options Bar. verify that 2800.The Edit Piping System panel displays. for System Name. 23 For Offset. 13 In the System Browser. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. and on the Options Bar. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. For Pipe Type. In the left pane. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . select 150 mm. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. click Place Base. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 14 Click Finish Editing System. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. verify that Main is selected. enter -3650. click Settings. For Offset. and a piping layout preview displays. for Diameter. system equipment. 19 Click OK.

and select solution 4. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. A (parallel movement control) displays. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. In general. Creating a Piping System | 287 . the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. On the Generate Layout panel. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and green represents branch lines). click Modify. verify that Network is selected. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions.

or manually modify the pipe.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . 29 Click Finish Layout. or that offset elevations are incorrect. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 32 If necessary. select a different layout solution. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. as shown. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. Either relocate the system components. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Training Files. the Connect Into tool.rvt. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m.33 Close the file with or without saving it. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and select the elbow fitting as shown.Fire Protection Piping Plan . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Next. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. 1 In the Project Browser. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 3 If necessary. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. and then you create piping to physically connect them. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and various manual pipe creation tools. 2 Zoom in.Design is highlighted.

7 On the Edit Piping System panel. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. you can select the pipe or duct. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 8 In the corridor. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 5 In the drawing area. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). and pipe or duct is created. or a system component to display system tools. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. click Add To System. radiators. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . mechanical equipment. click Finish Editing System. 9 On the Edit System panel. air terminals. and so on) are logically connected by a system. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system.

and then tile the views. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 18 Click Finish Editing System. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler.11 On the Generate Layout panel. 21 In the Piping Plan.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 23 View the result in the 3D view. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 14 Close the System Browser. verify that Solutions is selected. for Solution Type. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . and select solution 5. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. verify that Network is selected. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 13 Click Finish Layout. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 12 On the Options Bar.

28 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. select 2800. 25 Select the sprinkler. and click Draw Pipe. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. right-click. 29 Using the same method.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.24 In the Piping Plan. for Offset. 27 On the Options Bar. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe.

32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. click Training Files. Because the whole system highlights. 4 On the Options Bar. 33 Close the file with or without saving it.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system.rvt.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. indicating that it’s the active view. for Scale.Fire Protection Piping Plan . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. select 1 : 50. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 31 In the plan view. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser.

and click View Properties. 8 Right-click. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.6 Press Esc. double-click on the section head to open the section view.

14 Select the tee fitting.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. and click Draw Pipe. enter FP Section_Stair. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Under Identity Data.Design the active view. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . 22 In the drawing area. 17 Move the cursor up. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 19 Make Level 2 .Design.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and then right-click the top connector. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . For View Classification.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. right-click Design ➤ FP . and click Apply Default View Template. select FP . select MEP Section. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. select Design. Click OK. For Default View Template. 10 In the Project Browser. enter 2135. for View Name. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe.Fire Protection Plan . 12 If necessary. and press Enter. drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting. and then click Modify. for Sub-Discipline. 15 Press Spacebar.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 24 Select the cabinet. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. verify that Automatically Connect is active. and click Draw Pipe. zoom to the hose reel cabinet.23 In the section view. 26 On the Options Bar. and then click Modify. select .Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 25 Verify that Fire Protection . for Diameter. 27 On the Placement Tools panel.

verify that M_Gate Valve . and then click Modify.50 mm is selected. and click Open. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. 32 In the Open dialog. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 33 In the Type Selector. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm.rfa. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . as shown. click Yes to load a family. 31 In the alert dialog.29 Close the section view.

3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers.rvt. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise.Design ➤ 3D Views. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. click Training Files. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications.

and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 7 On the Options Bar. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. 4 In the floor plan view. and click OK. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. Changing the diameter. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. for Diameter. width. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 Click Modify. or height. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. click Check None. 6 In the Filter dialog. select 25mm. or width. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. height. width. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP.

and after each segment highlights. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. 12 If necessary. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. click to place the tag. Clear Leader. By hiding the linked file. . 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. 17 On the View Control Bar. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. NOTE Tags are view specific. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. 18 In the 3D view. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. Press Esc. They display only in the view in which they were placed.rfa. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. and click Open. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select the linked architectural file.

press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . for Diameter. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. and when the section highlights. select 100mm. 21 On the Options Bar.

as shown. 26 Using the same method. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. for Diameter. select 40mm.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. The pipe diameter is modified. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. and maximize the floor plan. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. and then tag the piping as shown. 25 On the Options Bar. 23 Close the 3D view. 24 In the drawing area. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

In this exercise. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. you created a wet fire protection system. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. For additional practice. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. In this tutorial. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. You added tags to pipes. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters.

304 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. create details. add annotations and dimensions. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. 305 .

306 .

You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. and click OK. under Floor Plans. and apply a view template. and click Properties. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. and click Rename. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. If the view included detail graphics. 3 In the Rename View dialog. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. right-click Copy of Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 2 In the Project Browser. dependent views.Design ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. matchlines. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. click Training Files. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and view references. 307 . You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view.

2 Right-click the dependent view title. click Training Files. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. create dependent views for areas B and C. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. and click OK. and click OK. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. views and put them on the sheet. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. 4 Using the same method.rvt. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. more focused. 7 Close the file without saving. 6 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. and click Apply Default View Template. 9 Click OK.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 10 In the drawing area. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. as shown. and click Rename. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

click the current value. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. and click OK.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. In the Color dialog. and then press Esc. Click OK. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. 14 Click Finish Matchline. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. select black. For Line Weight. select Double Dash . 19 In the drawing area. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. For Line Pattern. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 13 Press Esc twice. select 11. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference.

20 Select the upper view reference and. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. as shown. on the Options Bar. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 21 Using the same method. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 25 Using the same method. for Target view. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline.

click Training Files. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for View Name. 29 Close the file with or without saving it.Domestic Water. 2 Zoom in. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. For Default View Template. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. and zoom to each of the view references. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. and click Properties. select Plumbing Isometric. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 27 Using the same method. enter Plumbing Isometric . and select the section box. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D Plumbing. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Project Browser. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view.

select Dash. and then click OK. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and click to select it. For Sub-Discipline. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. select Plumbing. Click Apply. Click OK.Domestic Water. and click Apply Default View Template. for View Classification. 6 In the Project Browser. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. The section crop lines no longer display. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The selected piping displays as a dashed line. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. right-click Plumbing Isometric . 10 Right-click. select Documentation. For Pattern. select 3. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight.

press Tab 3 times. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . and click to select it. 13 Using the same method.

314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click to select it. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. as shown). press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. 15 Right-click. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe.

Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. 19 Using methods learned previously. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing.Sanitary Waste. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. specify Plumbing . 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Isometric. select 1. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. verify that Common is selected.5mm Arial.16 Press Esc. and for Default View Template. and in the view properties. For Slope. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. click on the Format value. and in the Type Selector.

and then place the callout view on a sheet.rvt. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.■ In the Format dialog. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. for Rounding. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. select To the nearest 10. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you use a plan view to create a callout view. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 22 Click OK twice. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. When the view is associated with a sheet. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. click Training Files. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click to place the spot slope annotation. 26 Press Esc twice. as shown.

and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). select 1 : 50. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). Creating Callout Views | 317 . 5 On the Options Bar. for Scale. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.

318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. Click OK.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. double-click M601 . using the same method. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. for Line Weight. 13 In the Project Browser. and select the viewport. drag it to the sheet. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. under Sheets (all). select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. select 5.

and click Apply Default View Template. right-click the callout view. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. 17 In the Project Browser. enter WSHP PART PLAN.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Default View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. For Title on Sheet. for View Name. Creating Callout Views | 319 . Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Click OK. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.

320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown.

29 Close the file with or without saving it. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click Rename. and click Apply View Template. right-click the detail view. under Names. enter Typical WSHP Detail. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click OK. 25 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. Creating Callout Views | 321 . 26 In the Rename View dialog.

322 .

duct tags. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. 323 . under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. and annotation to create a legend.rvt. work with model-based components. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. symbols. as shown. click Training Files. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. Creating Annotations In this exercise. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. linetypes. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan.

5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 9 Press Esc twice.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 8 With the text still selected. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. and select 1. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS.

select a supply diffuser. as shown. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. and then click Right Straight. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. a return diffuser. verify that Leader is cleared. Creating Annotations | 325 . Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 15 On the Options Bar. and a segment of rectangular duct. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 16 In the drawing area. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. a segment of round duct.

Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method.rfa. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. under Category. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 21 In the Load Family dialog. If necessary. 22 In the Tags dialog. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 24 On the Options Bar. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. and click Open. as shown. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. for Ducts. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. clear Leader.17 Click Modify.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. 20 In the Tags dialog. click Load. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 25 In the drawing area. and click OK. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

26 On the Options Bar. Creating Annotations | 327 . select Horizontal. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 In the drawing area. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Leader. and Attached End.

34 In the drawing area. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. as shown. for Leader. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . then click to the right to place the leader as shown. 36 Press Esc twice. select Free End.33 On the Options Bar.

Creating Dimensions In this exercise. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. click Training Files.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. That’s because you changed a type property. for Leader Arrowhead. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. and lock lighting fixtures. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and all elements of that type are affected.rvt. you use temporary dimensions to locate. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. 37 In the drawing area. lay out. and click OK. Creating Dimensions | 329 . select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. not simply an instance property. select the last tag placed. 40 Using the method learned previously. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan.

10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 13 Press Esc. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. select the dimension line. and then select the interior face of the wall. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 12 Click EQ. 14 Using the same method. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. On the Options Bar.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 17 Press Esc. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. linework. Creating a Legend | 331 . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. Creating a Legend In this exercise. 20 Using the same methods. enter 2430. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. and press Enter. and offset them from the wall.9). and notes. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. click the 3 interior locks on the line. Because the dimensions are locked. annotation symbols. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. click Training Files.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line.rvt. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. ■ 9 In the drawing area. and select 1. select 1 : 50. select Floor Plan. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.200 Neck. For View. For Scale. enter Diffuser Legend. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser .5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. 5 Click in the drawing area. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 .Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. click below the title to place the diffuser. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 10 Using the same method.

15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. and select 1. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Creating a Legend | 333 . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. click next to the top diffuser. 14 In the drawing area. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER.11 Press Esc.

Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. and then press Esc. 24 Select the component’s break line. The selected detail lines are now thin. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .RISE symbol for the copy start point.DROP and its text note. 21 Press Esc. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 26 Press Esc. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 27 While pressing Ctrl.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point.

and then click Modify. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 .Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 33 Click to the left of the left break line.30 Select Spot Elevation . 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.MECHANICAL LEGEND. Creating a Legend | 335 . enter E. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. and then click Modify. 34 Using the method learned previously. 35 Change the text on the right to N. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.

click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Press Esc. and select Title w Line .39 With the viewport still selected.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog.113 East elevation view. click Training Files. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. 337 . A drafting view using detail components.rvt. detail groups. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.Detailing 15 In this lesson. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. A detail callout that references another view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . indicating that it’s the active view. and text.

338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then modify and align the views. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 5 In the drawing area.113 East on the sheet. 7 Drag the Power Riser . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and click to place it. Next. 8 Using the same method. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. place Power Riser . select each of the 2 panelboards. clear Leader. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view.

giving the appearance of a single view. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Title on Sheet. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and click Deactivate View. 13 Right-click. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area.9 Press Esc. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. right-click. and click Activate View. select the 113 North view. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click OK. under Identity Data.

and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 22 Press Esc. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. select the 113 East elevation view. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. as shown. and select Title w Line . move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. right-click. right-click. 19 Select the Level 1 line. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 21 Using the drag control. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing .No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. and click Activate View. you add wiring to the diagram. In the next exercise.

Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 9 Beginning at the transformer. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . In the New Subcategory dialog. as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . notice that there are no snaps active.113 North view. for Line Weight.rvt. and then click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the Line Styles dialog.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). expand Lines. As you draw. for Name. enter Electrical Power. click New. Under Modify Subcategories. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. verify that Chain is selected. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. 2 Close the Project Browser. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. and click OK. click Training Files. 8 On the Options Bar. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. select 6. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram.

11 Using the same method. enter 3mm. for Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). as shown. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.10 Press Esc. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

TIP When you use the Trim tool. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. so that the result is as shown.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 .

21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. as shown. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center).5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 33 On the Options Bar. select Multiple. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and select 1. 29 Click Modify. 31 While pressing Ctrl. 28 Click above the cap. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point.

35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 36 Press Esc.

You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. for Offset. You enter exact values for each line length. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 .0. 40 Press Esc. and press Enter. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. you can ensure that they stay together. enter 12. 42 On the Options Bar. click on the length dimension value. enter 7. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. and then press Esc. 39 Move the cursor to the right. Using the same method. change the length of the bottom line to 3. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. Press Esc. and press Enter. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. enter 3. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol.

and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 46 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. while pressing Ctrl. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 54 Select the group. 51 Using the method learned previously. 50 With the group selected. for Name. TP-2B.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 47 In the drawing area. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 52 Select the detail group. select all 3 lines. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. enter Ground. and click OK.

you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. In later exercises. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. and will place it on sheet E01.

and double click Typical Make Up Air. 4 In the Project Browser. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. and click OK. 3 Select the section box. select 3D Views. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. click Home. Back. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. and then press Esc. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. for Name. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Right-click the copy. Walkthroughs. and click Apply View Template. 6 In the Rename View dialog. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 8 On the ViewCube. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click the corner where the Top.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. 2 Zoom in to view the section. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 7 Right-click the ViewCube. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and Left sides converge.

16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Typical. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right).■ ■ Under Names. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Move the cursor down and to the left. Click OK. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 Using the same method. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . and click to specify the second leader point. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. select 3D HVAC Iso. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected.

and then click OK. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and under Extents. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. under Extents. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. as shown. as shown. select Crop Region Visible. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display.18 Press Esc. To rotate and reposition a text label. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 19 Complete the text labels. 23 Click on the crop region.

Place a detail component. and click View Properties. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view.rvt. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. click Training Files. and under Extents. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK. 32 In the Instance Properties. scroll down. 30 On the View Control Bar. select Crop View and Section Box. 33 Right-click the view. clear Crop Region Visible. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . and click Activate View. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Deactivate View. 29 Right click the view. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m.25 Click OK. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Use detail lines to create a detail group. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser.

Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. as the rectangle start point. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. Click OK. select Plumbing. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. Click OK. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. right-click the view name. select Documentation. 3 In the Project Browser. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. select 1 : 5. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. for Sub-Discipline. 12 On the Element panel. 13 In the drawing area. click the point at the top of the drain. For View Classification. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 9 Zoom in to the component. For Scale. and click Properties. as shown.

Drafting Detail Components | 355 . click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point.P. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. Concrete. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. and then press Esc. 18 With the filled region still selected.I. for Type. 21 In the drawing area. select C. 22 Click Modify. and click OK. 20 Select 1.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region.

and then click point 6 as the endpoint.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 23 In the drawing area. select the filled region. select Multiple. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 28 Click Modify. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. and then click to select them. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 34 Press Esc. (Line). 31 On the Options Bar. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.

36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then press Esc.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. and then select the side of the slab above the line. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 40 Click Finish Region.

(Rectangle). 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing .. for Name. 49 Click Modify. 52 In the Create Group dialog. draw wide detail lines as shown. press Tab to highlight the chain. as shown. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 45 Using the method learned previously.D. select the Flashing Membrane group. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. and then click to select them. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. enter Flashing Membrane_F. and click OK. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region.

61 Using the same method. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 55 Press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . as shown. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. press Spacebar twice.

69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 64 Press Esc twice. and use the grips to resize the masking region. as shown. 67 On the Options Bar. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing .62 Press Esc twice. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. select Leader and Free End. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User.

76 To select the leader start point. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 80 Press Esc twice. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. Drafting Detail Components | 361 .70 In the Keynotes dialog. 71 Click Modify. 81 Select the text note. select 15000 (Division 15 . and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and click to specify the second leader point. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and then click OK. and click to specify the text insertion point. 72 If necessary. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange.

as shown. 84 Using the following image as a guide. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.82 Continue annotating the detail. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.

Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. open P103 . 88 In the drawing area. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. select the view title. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. and then press Esc twice.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 90 Press Esc. and click to place it.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful